JP2021142045A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of excellently giving an instruction to encourage a player to shoot game balls in a prescribed direction.SOLUTION: While Fanfare performance is executed, big right shooting promotion performance and small right shooting promotion performance are executed, after which during a jackpot round, the big right shooting promotion performance is ended, while the small right shooting promotion performance is continued. In a probability variable state or a time-shortening state after a jackpot game state is over, the small right shooting promotion performance continues to be executed. After the jackpot occurs, switch display performed when the Fanfare performance is executed and then switch to a jackpot round occurs does not affect the small right shooting promotion performance. Even by image display by group notice performance or the like executed in the probability variable state or the time-shortening state executed after the jackpot game state is over, the small right shooting promotion performance is not affected.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-49

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that seven symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, during the execution of the jackpot start effect, the player is configured to give a right-handed instruction to urge the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle. There was still room for improvement in the instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in such a predetermined direction.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction for urging a player to launch a gaming ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-38 (d1). As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
Moreover,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position.
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following gaming machine (A). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect using an movable movable body as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, a structure There were some that made it possible to perform an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the pseudo-movable body is only moved and displayed in the same manner as the movable body, and the interest of the production cannot be enhanced. In view of this point, the pseudo-movable body is used. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that can enhance the appeal of display.

The gaming machine described in means (A) is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention and a configuration other than the invention-specific matters. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing during hit fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the child table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine when it recovers from the electric power failure during the fanfare production by hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during a round after one round of big hits at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 3 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from a power failure during the final round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine as a feature part 241SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the variable display result and the variable pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various productions in a normal reach and a super reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the content and composition of various productions in super reach. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree by the execution state of development production A and development production B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect B. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect A type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect A type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development suggestion effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development suggestion effect type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect B type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect B type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a determination effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination effect type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect of super reach β mainly in normal reach. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of a production operation of a strong super reach effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after the big hit confirmation notification. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the details of the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the light emitting display part and the mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. It is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. It is explanatory drawing for comparing the 1st pseudo movable body display and the 2nd pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing the second modification of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the third modification of the feature portion 241SG.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "first". Also called "2 special design" or "2nd special design". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko game machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. When the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is related to the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

[Modification example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

<Explanation of feature 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 075F of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature section 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the feature part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in the space between the gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is equipped with a large winning opening door, and by sliding the opening and closing of the large winning opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the route to the normal large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Will be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 10-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Form a V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. .. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the gaming board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided above the attacker in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the left side of the image display device 5 are provided. It is equipped with a board left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d has a character attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this example) when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks when the movable body 32 is stopped or in an operating state. "XXX") is made to emit light. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light in the vicinity of the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light in the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a housing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the housing imitating the character on the right side of the image display device 5 is made to emit light. .. The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a housing that imitates a character, similarly to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the panel right lamp 075F009F and the panel left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a frame lamp composed of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. To be equipped.

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp in a counterclockwise direction from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit light in the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special drawing LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the normal symbol display 20, as shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED substrate 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (a), the special figure LED substrate 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 showing the variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable showing the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and special figure 2 storage display unit indicating the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. 075F024, the normal figure storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 075F026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 that urges the player to hit right. It is provided with a probability variation display unit 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot, a time reduction display unit 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 075F027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 075F020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 075F030 by a lighting means such as an LED. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. The hitting operation handle 30 is operated (how to hit) in this way. The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit right. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the number of second reserved storages, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status of the second special figure or A special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 showing a display result and a right-handed display unit 075F055 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of. Hereinafter, expressing the fluctuation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, expressing the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off. After the design is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L , It is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) by the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 075F005D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays. It constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second hold storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed, and a third display area 075F005Sb including a display of the first reserved storage number and a display of the second reserved storage number. doing.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and variable display of decorative symbols can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 075F005M having a size smaller than each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in the "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on the "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 075F005M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 075F005M is the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern in the part. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Big hit type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 10-6, in the hit type table, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state are shown for each type of hit in the jackpot. , And the number of open times (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize (for example, a control or lid that shortens the time to open the lid for opening and closing the V jackpot to be shorter than a predetermined time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In a normal jackpot, the condition that such a low accuracy and high base state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 fluctuation displays and the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 5R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have a common decorative symbol that stops when a jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot have the same fanfare effect (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs, and during the round of the jackpot game state. (For example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot has occurred as far as the stopped decorative pattern, the fanfare effect, and the round effect are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variation big hit, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 4Rth). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state.

As described above, in the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation jackpot has occurred halfway through the round, so these jackpots are also referred to as chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the V jackpot opens in the predetermined round (9Rth in the present embodiment) as in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a decorative pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs, a fanfare production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) and a round production performed during the round of the jackpot game state. Is different from the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability variation jackpot is also referred to as a special bonus.

(Each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type to be either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 10R probability variation jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). Then, out of a plurality of types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot as a jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be selected is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is used using the variation pattern determination random number (random 4). Is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, in the case of loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a fluctuation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs between the time saving state and the non-time saving state (in the time saving state, compared with the case where the time saving state is not obtained). Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set high), so that when the time is shortened, compared to when the time is not shortened. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability variation) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state, that is, a non-probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and the right of FIG. 10-8 (B) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variation jackpot determination table are set. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 10-8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in) is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

10-8 (B) and 10-8 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8 (B) is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8 (C) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (B), numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, such as "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and , The jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and 10-8, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 display a stopped big hit symbol by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. Can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot symbol can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the percentage of "10R probability variation jackpot" selected for the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher than that of the jackpot type that can be selected in the first special symbol, and the player The rate at which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is selected is high.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variation jackpot is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined. Loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variation jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variation jackpot designation command, or these are collectively referred to as 8C system commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of a 5R normal jackpot. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designated command, the jackpot start 2 designated command, and the jackpot start 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R normal jackpot. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designated command, the jackpot end 2 designated command, and the jackpot end 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

The command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variable pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of winning. Is.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the symbol (step 075FS001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step 075FS002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer-waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer-waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer-waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step 075FS004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "first" is set in (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probablely changed between the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set) in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set), which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, it is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 10-8 (C). One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and 10-8 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type when the jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the loss pattern variation pattern. Select the type judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select any one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. To decide.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to correspond to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbol (step 075FS301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 075F021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step 075FS307). After that, in the big hit opening preprocessing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step 075FS311 (N in step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability change flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and in step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS316), and the processing is terminated.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process proceeds to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process is performed. To finish.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step 075FS605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V open winning opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), the solenoid 075F083 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning area is set (step 075FS704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the probability variation determination flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time reduction flag indicating that the time is shortened is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Production processing during big hit)
Next, the processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the effect control CPU 120 when the data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot ends are set. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, the control of the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display the image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5. .. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / blinking / extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continuously controlled according to the set process data contents. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the process corresponding to the fanfare effect is to execute the fanfare effect under the control of the effect device. Set the data. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is used to urge the player to right-handed. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening opening designated command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each big hit round, the effect control device executes the effect during the round as follows. In order to do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of a 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set the process data of. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot opening designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

The process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-41) when the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening opening designated command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. To set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the V notice that the next 4R is the V open round is announced. Process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 10-42) is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103). The jackpot round (3R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after opening the large winning opening after 3R of the 5R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-43) aiming at the V that aims at the thing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A203). The jackpot round (3R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set. The effect aiming at V is a guidance display using an image display relating to the V large winning opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the production aiming at V, an image urging the player to hit right is displayed so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V large winning opening which is a specific area. In the production aiming at V, an image pointing to the V large winning opening itself, which is a specific area, may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed. , An image may be displayed that points to the route leading to the V-large winning opening, which is a specific area.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A104 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 continues to aim at V and execute the effect (see FIGS. 10-44). Set the process data for. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104). The jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A108 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 8R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a V advance notice effect to announce that the next 9R is the V open round. Set the process data to execute. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108). The jackpot round (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the big winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V big winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the production aiming at V that aims at that. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A208). The jackpot round (8R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for continuously aiming at V and executing the effect is set. .. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A109). The jackpot round (9R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, aiming at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the output control CPU 120 receives the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the output control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect under the control of the effect device as shown below. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIG. 10-44) when the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) is received from the CPU 103 during the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. ..

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets the process data for executing the V winning effect.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 has an ending effect (FIGS. 10-46, FIG. 10) indicating the end of the jackpot game state. -47) Set the process data to execute.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103. Perform the production of.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. Regarding the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 075F has the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in the following, the game of the part related to the feature unit 075F will be described in particular. do.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handed characters (for example, "right-handed") are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting, for example, a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10 times in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is open at the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is open only at the 4th R. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize, the V prize is not won. Further, since the V prize is not won, the effect of aiming at V is not executed at the 4th R, and the same background image as the 1R is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the hit is a probability variation jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion effect, it is notified that it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variation jackpot. After that, the V prize opening is opened on the 4th R, but the V prize does not occur, and the normal large winning opening is opened on the subsequent 5R, and the ending effect is executed when the 5R is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 4th R. Specifically, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the V probability variation suggests whether or not the 2R is a probability variation jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is a V open round is executed. In the 4th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 5th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 5th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds, and at the 7th round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal big hit and 150 times in the case of 5R probability change big hit and 10R probability change big hit). Will be done. Further, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state is in the probability variation state over a predetermined number of times (150 times) fluctuations controlled in the time saving state. Is controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round is the low accuracy high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round is the high accuracy high base state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As a type of jackpot in the second special figure game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Since it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, as in the case of the first hit, the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is completed, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
The timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the hit fluctuation. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 issues a hold storage number designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (C1 system command), background specification command (95 system command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the first hold storage display area 075F005D by specifying the first hold storage number based on the hold storage number designation command, or the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051. To update. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the special symbol variation starts based on the symbol variation designation command, and sets the effect start timing. Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence / absence of a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the display result designation command, and determines the decorative pattern according to the identification. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the effect content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach) based on the variable pattern designation command. Set the type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120 at t3 thereafter. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image congratulating the big hit on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound congratulating the big hit from the speakers 8L and 8R as a fanfare effect. Set the process data for. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image prompting right-handed striking on the image display device 5 and outputs a sound prompting right-handed striking from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed striking promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the big hit round starts at t4 after that, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening, and the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the big winning opening is open (A101 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 1st round.

After that, when the 1st round is completed at t5, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A102 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the second round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-41) based on the command (A102 command) during the opening of the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R is completed at t7, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 3Rs start at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A103 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3rd round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V notice effect (see FIGS. 10-42) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the 3rd round is completed at t9, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the inter-round effect between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 10-43) aiming at V based on the designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 is given a command (A104 command) to open the large winning opening. To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on a command (A104 command) during which the winning opening is open, and then aims at V (see FIG. 10-43). Set the process data to execute.

After that, when the V prize is generated at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th R is completed at t12, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 5th R starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A105 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th R is completed at t14, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic change state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command according to whether or not the number of reserved storages exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved storages exceeds 0, the CPU 103 specifies the number of reserved storages (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 10-60) that can identify that the game is not being performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative symbol or a small symbol on the image display device 5, or stops the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 10-60, and the game is such that the game is not performed, such as a character image or a logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting mode of the lamp. In the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L). , The right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A). It is represented by.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all lit as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the aspect of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each light / blink / blink in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by a hatching mode as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C).

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. 10-23 to 10-33 and 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory views showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (a), when the lost symbol is stopped due to the change of the special symbol of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stop of the lost symbol. After that, when there is a first hold storage number, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) to the effect control CPU 120. ), Display result specification command (8C system command), and fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change in the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the first special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a background designation command (95 series command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-23 (b1) and 10-24 (b3) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting. Send commands (FD commands). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) as a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-24 (c1) and 10-38 (d2) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

Here, the fanfare production will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare production includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The blessing part is a production part in which a production for congratulating the big hit is executed, and as will be described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image for congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5. The display, the sound for congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. The name display part is a production part that notifies the player that the jackpot round will start by notifying the name of the generated jackpot gaming state, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred. As will be described later in -24 (c2) and (c3), a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state may be displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The right-handed promotion part is an effect part that encourages the player to hit right-handed, and as will be described later in FIGS. 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29), the image display of characters and figures is used. A large right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to hit right is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and the symbol is confirmed, and then receives the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , Start the fanfare production, and execute the fanfare until the normal big prize opening opens and the big hit round starts.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), as a blessing part in the fanfare production, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed as an image. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that the sound displayed on the device 5 or congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode congratulates the big hit. Or something. Further, as a right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The production is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect is an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, "Congratulations!" Along with the character image. It is displayed on the layer on the front side (the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko game machine 1 side) rather than the character image). Further, in the fanfare effect, a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed hitting promotion effect, the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 promotes right-handed hitting. (Lights up in this example). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), and lights the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the small right-handed display promotion effect is based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). The image display device 5 displays an image composed of the figures and characters in the above, and an image congratulating the big hit. At this time, the image composed of the figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect located on the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big hit. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Will be done. At that time, first, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display / off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect based on the received background specification command. Upon completion, the image display device 5 displays the background image in the normal state. The image composed of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055. Becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare production, a part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!" "CHANGE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare production, following FIG. 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example). Among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!", "BONUS !!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 10-24 (c4) to FIG. 10-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character "right-handed"). ) Is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5, and a large right-handed promotion effect is executed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs guidance light emission that prompts the player to hit the right side by moving the light emitting portion of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In the present embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lit lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the light emitting part. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. The portion where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting portion is located may not be referred to as a light emitting portion. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the production time of each of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is specified. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec and then a large right-handed promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right-handed promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 decides to repeat the large right-handed promotion effect of 2000 msec twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, each time of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is subdivided and referred to in each time zone. The grandchild table is specified.

Here, the grandchild table W11 common to the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated for the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, the grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, the grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and the grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory views showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows the data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all lamps are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). The data of turning off (0x000000) is specified in. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are specified for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, in FIGS. 10-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting are used. On the other hand, a broken line circle is attached.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T1, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T4, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T5, and then the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T6. The lamp lights up, then the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T7, then the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T8, and then the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T9. Then, at T10, the 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T46, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T47, and then the 2nd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T54, the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect after all the lamps are turned off at T56 is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time (1000 msec). It is T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L, and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If the grandchild table W11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored is used, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), it starts from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , Frame right lamp Up to the 8th lamp of 075F009R, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. The large right-handed promotion effect by such a frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all of them are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Data for turning off the lamp (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X). Data are specified for each of the above. Further, in FIGS. 10-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and data (000) at the timing of ending lighting. ) Is marked with a broken line.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T4, and then the movable body lamp at T5. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Turns off. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and then kept off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. It is (T57). Further, as compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be used. While it is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Turns off. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is lit in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side, starting from the lighting of the left X, and then to the lamp of the middle X and the lamp of the right X. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on, and the data is turned off. The data of (0x0000000) is specified.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec with respect to 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec to determine a predetermined value. The color change of the pattern (for example, seven colors) is repeated.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 320 msec to be turned on, and the data of extinguishing (0x0000000) is specified as the data. There is.

When the large right-handed promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. The attacker lamp 9c is made to repeat the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to it a plurality of times, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned off by referring to the grandchild table A11c over the last 320 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on, then the frame lamp is turned off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Will turn off. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Further, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the color is turned off at the beginning, the color of a predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the color is turned off, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on 3 It is not necessary to prepare data for all the time from the beginning to the end for lighting of 2000 msec by repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for the repetition of the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle while dividing it into scenarios. , It is sufficient to prepare the data of only the repeating part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), an effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" continues to be displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the blinking attacker lamp 9c is also turned off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. As a result, a series of first large right-handed promotion effects is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second large right-handed promotion effect starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamp 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In the second large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect. As a result, when shifting to the jackpot round after the jackpot promotion effect is completed, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) in the jackpot round and the sound in the jackpot promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second large right-handed promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks / turns off in the same manner as the first large right-handed promotion effect. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to right-handed in a manner that emphasizes it more than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, by executing the large right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound (for example, a cure sound effect) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed strikes, in the second large right-handed strike promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed strike promotion effect, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. Can be prevented from interfering with.

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion effect, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to appear gradually in stages, and moreover, the right-handed hitting is effectively promoted by lighting or blinking the lamp by the game effect lamp 9. Yes, the effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). For example, the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect appears one character at a time, but all the character images appear at once in the character image in the name image in the big hit game state. In addition, the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect is larger than that of all the character images in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big hit game state is displayed and the player is notified that the big hit has been achieved, the player can be notified by further emphasizing the right-handed hit by the big right-handed promotion effect.

Since the attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and aims at the time of launching the game ball, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a flashy color such as seven colors that the player can easily recognize and blinks. It is possible to draw more attention to the player's target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without blinking.

In the following example, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variation jackpot, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning effect are not executed, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is turned off and the second big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the switch to the big hit round is switched as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually reduced by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-39 (d3) and 10-40 (e4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in the image display called "transition". "Transition" is a switch that is inserted between the first cut and the second cut when the scene of the video is switched from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It is an effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to the second degree (for example, 0) which is lower than the first degree. % Or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 100% (first degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 50% to 0% (second degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) opaquely, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-ins. When the opacity (which can be said to be opaque) is changed instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned% value is reversed. That is, in the fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) higher than the second degree. ) Will be changed over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in the fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99) higher than the first degree. %) Is changed over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) transparently, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-outs. When changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), in the fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is set to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) To a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) lower than the first degree, over a predetermined time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% in the state where the rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the characters "Right-handed !!" The image is gradually made transparent to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen located behind the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering it to, the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque to make it easier to see (fade in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer of the screen.

As a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". Crossfade is, for example, by fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. As an appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image always displayed in the second layer of the screen located on the back side. Is shown once during the switching from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, so that it is different from the method such as crossfade.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without receiving. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or deteriorated, such as the image of the small right-handed promotion effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the big winning opening is usually opened. , A background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed. Furthermore, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. As described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect has already been completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. Arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the first round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A201 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), the large winning opening is normally kept closed during the round, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, it continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A102 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2nd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-41 (e5) and 10-42 (e8) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed during 2R. Specifically, the character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed together with the image prompting the operation of the push button 31B so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestion effect, the V is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. A character image of "Success !!" is displayed as an effect to notify that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the second round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A202 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), during the round, the large winning opening is normally kept closed, and the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. The text image of "Success !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A103 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-42 (e10) and 10-43 (e12) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened and the V notice effect is executed. Specifically, the character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed together with the character image so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3Rs, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is overlapped with the character image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The text image of "Grab V in the next round !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3Rs are completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A203 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect aiming at V during the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), during the rounds, the effect is executed aiming at V while the large winning opening is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) aimed at the player by right-handed, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the effect during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the production aiming at V, it is possible to urge the player to right-handed to let the game ball enter the V large winning opening by using the image display related to the V large winning opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A104 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large winning opening is opened, and the production is continuously aimed at V. As a result, the player will aim for the V-large winning opening by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during 4R, the effect of aiming at V is executed, and the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the game ball enters the V large winning opening and the V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device pass designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e16) and 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by an effect control command, but proceeds with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the V prize is generated by overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image of "V" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round is completed, the V large winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A204 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), the V large winning opening and the normal large winning opening remain closed during the round, and overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and further, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A105 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-45 (e19) and 10-46 (e21) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal grand prize opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner is continued. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, the effect during the round is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be in the upper right. (Arrows and letters) are displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-46 (f1) and 10-47 (f4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect is started, an image for selecting the stage in the probability change state after the big hit game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of “Dream RUSH !!”) indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. It is displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), the immersive suppression notification effect is executed during the ending effect. Specifically, an image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game. Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. At the time of consecutive hits, a game result image showing the result of the game in the big hit game state (for example, the number of prize balls) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first hit. Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), an image for preventing forgetting to take a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

When there is a second hold storage number after the ending effect is completed, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. Set based on (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, in the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop.

When there is a second hold storage number after the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command) and a background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , The symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and so on. Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g3) and 10-49 (g5) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group notice effect is executed as a notice effect during the jackpot fluctuation. The group notice effect is a specific symbol that disappears after making it difficult to see the reach symbol by the appearance of objects such as characters in stages or at once on the screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes a match (for example, 777) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes it difficult to see the design is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the effect image. Arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the production image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed striking effect or the player promotes the small right-handed striking due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a big hit (10R probability variation big hit) occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command). To send. Since the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed display lighting command (FD command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Yattane !!") is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS !!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that occurred after the fanfare effect was started is the image display device 5. The sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. In addition, in the case of consecutive chan hits per special figure 2, since the large right-handed promotion effect has already been executed when the special figure 1 is hit, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further. , The frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V notice effect, V aiming effect, and V winning effect are executed during the round as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, and when the big hit round ends. , The ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the probability change state after the big hit game state is controlled again. In this series of games, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and a fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display units 075F055 of the unit 075F050 keeps lighting. Eventually, when the probability change state after the big hit game state ends and the normal state is controlled without the big hit occurring, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display / off designation command to the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Turn off each of the parts 075F055. As a result, the player will hit the left again in the normal state.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from power failure]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from the power failure during the fanfare effect according to the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power failure shown in FIG. 10-51 assumes a power failure 1 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-51, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). The state of -24 (c1)) and the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" in this example) are displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)). (State), only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is "right-handed! If a power failure occurs in any of the states in which the character image of "!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A101 command), the effect image in 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!"), and a name image showing the name of the big hit game state (in this example, "CHANGE BONUS !!" (Character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed !!" added to the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs before the large right-handed promotion effect is executed or before the large right-handed promotion effect is completed, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, at the very least, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right immediately after recovering from the power failure, and he forgets to hit right and cannot usually let the game ball enter the grand prize opening. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power interruption 2 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. If a prize ball is obtained during the subsequent round, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, for example, 10 pt is added for every 10 pieces obtained. The point image is not limited to the one displayed at 0 pt after returning from the power failure, and the point may not be known by the predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-53 causes the power supply 3 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, when a power failure occurs while an image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from the power failure during two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-54 assumes a power interruption 4 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestion effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image is displayed. After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-55 is a power interruption 5 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, when a power failure occurs in the state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 2R (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when recovering from the power failure during the round after 3 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-56 causes the power supply 6 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3Rs and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, when a power failure occurs in the state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)) during the round after 3R, the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the effect aiming at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control Based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, the CPU 120 aims at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) and executes the effect. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the V grand prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the four rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power interruption 7 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the effect of aiming at V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), and if a power failure occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to "recovering ...". The character image of is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done. Further, when a power failure occurs while aiming at V and performing a small right-handed promotion effect as in 4R, and as shown in FIG. 10-51 described above, it is small together with a large right-handed promotion effect. In the case where a power failure occurs while executing the right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed while the effect aiming at V and the large right-handed promotion effect are not executed after recovering from the power failure in common with each other. Is at least running. Therefore, in a common manner in any situation, it is possible to urge the player to hit right at least immediately after recovering from the power failure.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-58 causes the power supply 8 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-58, when an electric power failure occurs in a state (state of FIG. 10-45 (e18)) in which an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the final round of the jackpot at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power interruption 9 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 10). When a power failure occurs in the state of −46 (e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of “Recovering…” is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it becomes the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the final round of the big hit, the small right-handed promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player will be notified. It is possible to encourage right-handed hits and prevent forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power interruption 10 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-60, among the ending effects, an image for selecting a stage in the probability variation state after the big hit game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character. A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (state in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the immersive suppression notification effect, and the result of the game in the jackpot game state are shown. The state in which the game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and the image for preventing forgetting to remove the card owned by the player are displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (state of FIG. 10-47 (f4)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the character image of "Recovering ..." is turned on by turning on the power. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, when there is a hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , Waits until the display result specification command (8C system command) and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are received, and when these commands are received, the hold storage number specification command (C1 system command, C2 system command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 series command), FIG. 10-48 (g1) shows. An effect image corresponding to such a fluctuation of a special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when there is no hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the designated command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designated command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial symbol ("123" as the decorative symbol and the small symbol in this example) stopped. ..

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the ending, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to win the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state by forgetting to hit right. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by the feature section 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature unit 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing that the CPU 120 executes a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the third guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)). The part that displays the image corresponding to the production and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the game medium has changed from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area to the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), V is aimed at and produced. The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing that the CPU 120 executes a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2). ), While ending the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area (for example, FIG. 10-44 (for example, FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to the effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing that the CPU 120 executes a right-handed suggestion effect or an effect aiming at V),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
After that, by receiving the 1R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-38). (D1), (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3Rs are completed (for example, a command designated after opening the large winning opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the production aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, by receiving the V pass command (for example, the probability change determination device pass designation command (AD00 command)), the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), the part that aims at V and ends the image display corresponding to the effect while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (while the display is being performed) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, FIG. 10-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. It is possible to make sure that the player is recognized, and then, while ending the large right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is continued as it is so as not to appeal to the player that the player is excessively right-handed. In addition, the production of aiming for V to aim at the V big winning opening is executed from the time when the V big winning opening is still closed, and by continuing as it is even after the V big winning opening is opened, V It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming at the big winning opening and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning opening. Further, after the V prize is generated and the V large prize opening is closed, the player can be prevented from giving unnecessary promotion notification by aiming at V and ending the effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is always required to hit right-handed even after the V-winning occurs before the V-large winning opening is opened. Can be prompted. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right. In addition, when an electric power failure occurs while the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the effect is supported by aiming at V. In both cases when a power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the text image of "Recovering ..." and the small image after the power is turned on. Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to at least urge the player to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if a power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). Including the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in c1).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and during a predetermined period during a predetermined period during which a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed. The second guidance display is performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)).
In the period after the predetermined period, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-39 (e1) to 10-46 (e21)). The part that does not display the image corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect during the round, but continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after a big hit as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect in the probabilistic state),
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-38 (d1). As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group notice effect) (for example, the image display by the group notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. Make sure to recognize it, and during the subsequent big hit round, end the big right-handed promotion effect while continuing the small right-handed promotion effect as it is so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed. Can be done. In addition, the player can always be encouraged to hit right by continuously executing the small right-handed promotion effect even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state is completed. Furthermore, after the big hit occurs, the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the big hit round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the big hit game state is Since the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the image display such as the group notice effect performed in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the end, the player can always be encouraged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It is a gaming machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. When this happens, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not output sound in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round will start, by notifying the player that he will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be notified to hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a gaming machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In the guidance means, the display result of the variable display is displayed in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed. When the specific display result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the frame lamp promotes a large right-handed strike. The part that does not light up according to the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round will start, by notifying the player that he will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be notified to hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in the present embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a gaming machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after the light emitting means is turned off (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, the light is turned off once and then hit to the right. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to FIGS. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to promote a large right-handed strike. The part that does not output sound in the corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round will start, by notifying the player that he will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be notified to hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting location of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a gaming machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120) and
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is turned off once, it corresponds to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the frame lamp responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round will start, by notifying the player that he will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player will be notified to hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting location of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a mode that is emphasized rather than the name display of the advantageous state that is a part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the large right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). In addition, characters appear step by step, and the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he is hitting right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second time. Regarding the subsequent right-handed promotion, no sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. At the same time, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onward. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then to the right. The sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the striking promotion, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. Sound is output and no sound is output in conjunction with the third right-handed promotion. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to each of the first and second right-handed promotion. Note that the sound data includes only sound data linked to one right-handed promotion, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. .. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice. .. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c3)). As shown in the above, after turning off all the lamps of the frame lamp, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect).

Specifically, since all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, the player is encouraged to strike right-handed more easily and effectively. Can be done.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on the data defined by the lighting data table.
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance emission, and a child table (for example, a child table) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referred to by the light emitting means is defined. , The child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and refers to the child table to specify the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Turn on / blink / turn off by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently turned on in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not perform the guided light emitting is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, so that a grandchild table is provided. No. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player launches the game medium (for example, FIGS. 10-25 to 10-). A portion in which each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in 33).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by turning on each lamp included in the frame lamps in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, a large right-handed promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a portion for lighting the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes the large right-handed promotion effect while being lit in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to right-handed.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the fade-in and fade-out switching display as the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1)). ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and the fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion effect switches the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round. Continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the big hit round by the switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue to hit right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in −49 (g5), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the small right-handed promotion effect affects the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the probable change state after the big hit advantageous state ends. Continued without being done. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the advance notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right-handed promotion effect continue to be displayed without impairing the visibility. You can encourage the player to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2)). As described above, in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first hit. Does not output sound with, or the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by promoting right-handed striking in a manner of frequently emphasizing.

[Modification example of feature section 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the lights before executing the big right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , Not limited to turning off all the lamps, some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the large right-handed promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

(About switching display during big hit round)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are performed. Although the example of executing the switching display of the background image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, an effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting a BGM (musical piece) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be displayed.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the effect mode may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen may be displayed.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big hit round, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the display of the production image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect of inserting a pure white screen during the reach effect or a blackout effect effect of inserting a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of the pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or it is difficult to see the decorative pattern by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the effect to make it. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the production aiming at V)
In the present embodiment, as a specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is illustrated, and V is aimed at as an effect. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the production aiming at V, which is the third guidance display using the image display related to a specific area, is not limited to the one that points to the V big winning opening itself, but the one that points to the vicinity of the V big winning opening. It may also point to a route leading to the V-large winning opening, for example, a lid portion for opening and closing the V-large winning opening located on the upstream side of the V-large winning opening.

(About the big right-handed promotion production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-31 (c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed !!" appears. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the character image of "Right-handed !!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. Then, it may be composed of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About advantageous condition)
In the present embodiment, the period of the “advantageous state” is the period shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21). ), But it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is a period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, a period shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-47 (f4) (t4 to 10-21 in FIG. 10-20). (Period up to t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the symbol in which the big hit occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About right-handed promotion production in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit per special figure 1, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. It was lit with, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of big hit per special figure 1. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the jackpot per special figure 1 is a probabilistic jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output depending on the mode. Further, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a sound in the manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. May not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chans per special figure 2)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

Further, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of continuous chan per special figure 2. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the continuous chan hit in Special Figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R change to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. Further, when the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. You may not output the sound with. When the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, unlike the first hit in the special figure 1, the frame lamp has a special mode (for example, gold or seven colors, etc.) according to the large right-handed promotion effect. ), Or the sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special mode according to the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right-handed promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit in the special figure 1. ..

(About the 3rd guidance display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display relating to the specific area, an image pointing to the V big winning opening during the big hit round in the probability variation big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game state ends, or a variable winning ball It may be applied to display an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), a symbol variation specification command (8D system command), and a display result from the CPU 103. Based on the reception of the designated command (8C series command) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (81 series command), "Aim!" With an arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). The character image of "" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right-handed promotion effect may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost symbol)
In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 7 is illustrated. It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a lost symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time-saving symbol is won, the lottery will not be used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not there is a transition to the time-saving state, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when performing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the settings, so that the set values can be changed only if they cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times after the time reduction start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, it always goes through the jackpot gaming state, so that the player is encouraged to hit right in the time-saving state. It was possible to perform the big right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare production that is executed when a big hit occurs. However, when the lost symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure a time for executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect between the time when the symbol is displayed and the time when the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect may be executed by the following methods.

For example, when the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of the lost symbol that is not the time-saving symbol stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the lost symbol that is the time-saving symbol stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. In the meantime, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control in the time-saving state. In addition, in the display result designation command (8C system command), the CPU 103 is a loss specification command for time reduction, in addition to the display result specification command indicating a normal loss variation in which the time reduction is not given. A display result designation command indicating the above may be prepared, and the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 by properly using both commands depending on whether or not the time saving symbol is lost. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds when it receives the display result designation command indicating the normal loss fluctuation, and sets the symbol confirmation time when it receives the display result designation command indicating the loss fluctuation for shortening the time. May be 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, “time saving RUSH”) indicating the name of the time saving state on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound is output in the corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. A part of the time-saving fanfare effect can be made to correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image (for example, "O") congratulating the time saving state even before the name image ("time saving RUSH") produced by the time saving fanfare effect is displayed. The text image of "Medeto !!") is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound for congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting for congratulating the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to be a mode. In addition, as a small right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right-handed") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The right-handed sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may be changed to a right-handed display (lighting). The image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both are urging the player to hit right for the same period.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed while the name image (“time-saving RUSH”) produced by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then FIG. 10-25. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), a large right-handed strike is promoted during the time-saving fanfare production as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may perform the production. During this time, the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed promotion effect may be continued as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time longer than the symbol confirmation time of the lost symbol that is not the time reduction symbol, the symbol confirmation time is greatly increased. It is possible to execute a striking promotion effect and a small right-handed striking promotion effect.

In addition, when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, the time reduction is not limited to the one that executes the large right-handed promotion effect or the small right-handed promotion effect by using the symbol confirmation time as described above. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (variation) of the game whose design is fixed, in the next game (variation), the time saving fanfare effect is executed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right are performed. You may perform a striking promotion effect. Specifically, when the next game (fluctuation) of the game in which the loss pattern is confirmed is the loss fluctuation, the time-saving fanfare production is performed instead of performing the production that expects a hit such as reach production or advance notice production. At the same time, a large right-handed promotion effect or a small right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol is confirmed is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so that the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no hold memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare effect is executed while the symbol is not changed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command (9F command) is not transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 so that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed and the time saving fanfare effect is not hindered. .. Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the description below but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-38 (d1). As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
Moreover,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position.
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. Examples thereof include a gaming machine in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.

According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

That is, the instruction to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction is emphasized by the first guide display and the second guide display in the predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, and then the first guide display is displayed. By instructing to take over the second guidance display and launch the game ball in a predetermined direction without taking over, it is possible to avoid feeling annoyed by not overemphasizing the instruction, and moreover, the second guidance display is displayed first. And conservatively instruct to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction, then recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, firmly instruct to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction by the first guidance display. At the same time, the player pays attention to the effect in the expectation that the movable body effect is executed when the pseudo-movable body display effect is executed, so that the interest of the effect can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an instruction of a direction in which a gaming ball should be launched in an advantageous state when installed in a gaming field is easy for the player to understand, attracts the player's interest, and easily improves the interest of the production.

Further, even when the pseudo movable body effect is executed, it is preferable to display the display so as not to overlap with the guidance display. By doing so, it is possible to perform a more suitable production while notifying the player of accurate information, and the interest is improved.

Further, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can draw the player's attention to the execution of the pseudo-movable body display effect, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. Examples thereof include a gaming machine in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Feature unit 241SG form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
With
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are common directions ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are common downward directions).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo-movement). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 14-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by being able to perform an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the movable body by displaying the pseudo movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided.
In the pseudo-movable body display, when the body moves from the first position (for example, the first origin position) to the second position (for example, the first effect position) different from the first position, a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount is performed. It is a display that imitates a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be performed.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position corresponding to the first position to the second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display an image. The display device 5 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 vertically between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Some parts),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a recoil operation of a specific movement amount when the movement is displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). Is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position.
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. 14-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize a simulated effect similar to that of the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position. 1 The part that can be moved and displayed at the effect display position) and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position).
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed (for example, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, the development using the mounted movable body 32. When the effect A and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. (Big hit expectation) is high. See Fig. 14-11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z200 can be moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position),
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A special suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-movable body display is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a notice effect A foretelling the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a big hit).
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the development of a strong super reach effect), and
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and suggests that the notification effect is executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. Development suggestion production that suggests the possibility that
Is feasible and
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed by any one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the expectation degree at which the notification effect is executed is different.
The display means
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( 14-25 (C)-(F)),
In the predetermined effect, after the pseudo-movable body display is displayed at the second display position, it is hidden without performing the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (FIGS. 14-26 (A). )-(J), see FIG. 14-27 (A)),
When the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden before the notification effect is executed, the notification-related image (for example, the notification-related image (for example,) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 14-26 (F) to (J) and 14-27 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion effect, since the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the same way as the movable body as a structure, attention should be paid to whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, in the predetermined effect, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the moving display in the same manner as the movable body, and the display is not returned from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is hidden, the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestion of executing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, and a part that can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5). ,
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
With
The effect executing means is
A special effect for notifying that the player is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled in the jackpot game state) and
A specific effect suggesting that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the determined effect is executed), and
Is feasible and
The display means
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed.
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is displayed from the second display position. It is hidden without being moved to a position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special effect (for example, an aspect at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in a display area including the second display position. It is possible (see FIGS. 14-27 (B) (D)-(F)),
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is performed from the second display position. Move to the position and display it, and then hide it (see FIGS. 14-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the display of the suggestive image is prioritized from the second display position to the movement display in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. 1 Since it is hidden without returning to the display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of executing the special effect, while in the special effect, the pseudo movable body display moves and displays in the same way as the movable body. , It is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position)
The display means
The pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (FIG. 14-40 (A)-(C)),
In the display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image (for example, an image showing a plurality of glass fragments in which the glass is cracked) that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable body display. It is possible to display the effect image Z71) in which the Z71A is scattered (see FIGS. 14-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display can be suitably impressed by the player by emphasizing the movement display with a specific image. can.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a first pseudo-movable body). The display Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the image display device 5 shifts the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. Equipped with a part that can be moved and displayed)
The first pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIGS. 14-16 (B)).
The second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIGS. 14-16 (C)).
The display means
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C)). ),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position. (See FIGS. 14-40 (A)-(C)),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The speed is different (for example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. It is faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Fig. 14-40),
When the first pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when it is displayed (for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). When the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the PBY-3 or the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation) differs between when the pattern PBY-1 which is moved to the display position and displayed and the pattern PBY-2 which is moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position are executed. (See Figures 14-10 and 14-20 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed, and the first pseudo-pseudo in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different. The player can be made to recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display by the difference in the speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first effect position) different from the first position is provided.
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a recoil motion of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIGS. 14-36).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a recoil motion display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIGS. 14-36).
The specific movement amount is larger than the constant movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. 14-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize a simulated effect similar to that of the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, an effect position) different from the first position is provided.
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the moving display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (for example, the moving distance L1) (FIG. 14-16),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable body display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable body, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
The pseudo-movable body display includes an effect display unit (for example, effect display units Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (for example, mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B).
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the effect display unit (see FIGS. 14-36 (B1) and B2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth forms.
The movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo-movable body display is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the first pseudo-movable). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 14-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th forms.
The moving period between the first position and the second position of the movable body includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (FIG. 14-39 (A). )reference),
The movement display period of the pseudo-movable body display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means can display the light emission display unit by moving the pseudo movable body display to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 first. A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed in substantially the same cycle after moving to the effect position. (See FIG. 14-31 (D)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the pseudo movable body display that is moved and displayed at the second display position.

The gaming machine of the 14th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 13th forms.
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means does not emit light from the light emitting display unit when the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed (see FIGS. 14-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect by making the (incomplete) pseudo-movable body display during the moving display inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 13th or 14th form.
The movable body includes a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved to the second display position and displayed, the display means displays the light emission of the light emission display unit in the same manner as the light emission of the light emitting unit (the effect control CPU 120 displays the light emission of the light emission display unit. A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first effect position. See FIG. 14-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the 16th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 17th forms.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the second pseudo-movable). The part where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position, and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position. Are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the advance notice effect A, and the advance notice effect B. The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position. See FIGS. 14-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with the movable body.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction. It can be moved and displayed (see FIGS. 14-43).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 11B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11 (A).

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "out of time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit judgment values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the common numerical range (of the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1) When only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value is within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range. The numbers are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving is out, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio at which the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio for all the set values, so that the gambling property depends on the set value. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, with regard to the time-saving loss, which is assigned a common number of judgment values for each setting value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-saving loss reference value of 65317 in any setting value, it can be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time reduction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the mounted movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, command to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output of. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command that specifies to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-40. In the following, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals to the configurations having the same functions as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or different in form and arrangement position. The points different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Is possible. Further, the button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the effect control CPU 120 can turn on / off the button LED 62.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped and then the power supply is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, and is executed when neither the first hold storage nor the second hold storage exists in the special symbol normal processing, as will be described later. It is a command transmitted by the demo display setting, and the customer waiting demo effect is executed when a predetermined period elapses after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-3 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 14-4, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for use is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. As will be described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, individual special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1 in this embodiment). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 14-5 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 14-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled, any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 14-6 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot type includes high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game by the "probability variation jackpot C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It has an open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this embodiment, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-7). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach variation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... In addition, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... May be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type as in the normal reach fluctuation putter.

The variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the fluctuation patterns of super reach, the fluctuation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ have a variable display period longer than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (60 seconds). Has been done.

Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variable display result is selected. Using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). To decide from. Further, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is used. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is different. It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern of the superreach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability jackpot. In addition to being easy, the super reach β is easier to determine than the super reach α, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α out-of-range variation pattern), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

As described above, when the variable display result is "off" in this embodiment, the special figure variable display time is normal based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3 or 4 or the like. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) shorter than the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed. However, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot in the high base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ) It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the low base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern). ..

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4. The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. It is assigned, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. , PB1-4 are assigned 400 determination values. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probabilistic jackpot. Since the fluctuation pattern is easily determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 Determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Assigned, 10 determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time reduction state), the special figure variable display time is a fluctuation of the normal non-reach deviation based on the time reduction state. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the variation pattern (PA1-4) for shortening, which is shorter than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display result is displayed next while preventing the game from being delayed. It is possible to shorten the period until it becomes a big hit. The fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are considered to be fluctuation patterns that can be executed only in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a general drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game. It includes a control counter setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. This effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution by the hold storage of the first special figure, and the buffer numbers 1-1 to 1 to the buffer numbers 1 to 4 corresponding to the hold storage 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to variable display during execution by hold storage of the second special figure, buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to hold storage 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data that composes the start prize reception command buffer, in which entries that can store data such as the start opening prize specification command, the symbol specification command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, are set in association with each of them, It is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, the four commands of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command that constitute these one set are the buffer numbers corresponding to the start opening prize designation command and the hold storage number notification command. Stored in the entry of.

The stored contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 1 to 0 to the buffer numbers 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure are the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1"" when the start condition is satisfied. ) Is started, as will be described later, the contents are shifted upward one by one, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are stored. , It is cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is finished. Similarly, the stored contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 2 to 0 to the buffer numbers 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure are the highest held storage (buffer number "2" when the start condition is satisfied. When the variable display of -1 ") is started, it is shifted upward one by one as described later, and the buffer number" 2-0 "that stores the contents of the hold storage for which the start condition is satisfied is stored. The stored contents are cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is terminated.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening. It is stored from the entry), and at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, it is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) in the empty entry of the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. .. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning is the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (buffer number "1-0" or "2-". What is stored in the entry of "0") is deleted, and is stored in the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1-1". Each command is shifted to the buffer number "1-0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Will be done. Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Direction during Super Reach)
Here, the production during the super reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-9. FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an execution period of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode after starting the variable display. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, the super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as the variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach display mode. After the reach effect is finished, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit in the normal reach effect in the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) as an effect different from the variable display effect (expected). It is possible to execute the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B for notifying the degree). Further, in the normal reach effect in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute the development effect A that notifies that the weak super reach effect is developed (contents that are advantageous for the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the weak super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) develops into a strong super reach effect (contents advantageous for the player). It is possible to execute a development suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute the development effect B that notifies the content).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a determined effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or a miss in the strong super reach effect in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ). ..

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation, it becomes a big hit or miss in the normal reach production without developing into a weak super reach production, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach production in the normal reach production. In the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ), it develops into a strong super reach production in a weak super reach production.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reach with higher expectations than weak super reach (big hit expectation; normal reach <super reach). α <super reach β <super reach γ).

Further, in the normal reach and the super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, and common or at least partially similar types of super reach effects may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the type of super reach is not limited to the above three types, and may be one type, two types, or four or more types.

In the feature unit 241SG, in the above-mentioned advance notice effect A and advance notice effect B, development effect A, B, development suggestion effect, and decision effect, the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure is moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later is performed. And the second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, and the second pseudo-movable body display will be described.

(Flow of development of pachinko game machines)
First, in order to understand the background of mounting the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, the second pseudo-movable body display, and the like as described above on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The outline of the flow of the above will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-12. FIG. 14-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the flow of development of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 14-12, when the development of a predetermined pachinko gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) starts, it is first clarified what to convey to the game store and the player and what to feel. Create a plan document, etc. (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specifications, game flow, reach and other production configurations, board configurations, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the model will be examined.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (primary prototype, design mock) of the board (game board), images and materials that can imagine variable display, etc., a specification confirmation table, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but the reason why multiple movable bodies cannot be mounted (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc. Durability) and other problems may occur.

Next, a video such as a variable display or an effect is created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the non-mounted movable body is created. .. Since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display is inferior in impact to the case where the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the recoil display operation and the speed of the movement display when the movement display is stopped are performed. It is often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board surface (game board) including images such as variable display and production is created, and the variable display, core production, movement of the movable body, etc. are confirmed (step 241SGS004). If there is no problem, a mold product or the like for the board surface (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by mounting a plurality of movable bodies capable of providing an impactful effect to the player, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced and the effect can be diversified. It is often difficult to install more than one. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, the moving display of the pseudo movable body display that imitates the non-mounted movable body is often used.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems described above, one movable body ( For example, the mounting of the mounted movable body 32) was decided, and the mounting of other movable bodies (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and was not mounted. Instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are imitated. The moving display of the second pseudo-movable body display and the moving display will be described as being adopted.

In the above description, the pseudo-movable body display exemplifies a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which are finally not mounted. It is not limited, and although it was possible to mount a movable body, a pseudo movable body display may be used in order to diversify the production. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or will be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
Hereinafter, the mounted movable body 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-13. 14-13 are views showing a moving mode of the mounted movable body, and FIG. 14-13 is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13 (A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of an effect unit 32A and a mechanism unit 32B which are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in the front view and are decorated on the front surface, and the effect unit 32A The left and right sides of the mechanism unit 32B extending to the left and right sides are supported by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, so that the upper origin position (FIG. 14-13 (A)). ), The position indicated by the solid line) and the effect position below the origin position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13 (A)) can be moved in the vertical direction. The mechanism unit 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the effect unit 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L and 201R include the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, and the driven gears 203L and 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R and the driven gears 204L and 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L and 203R. , The rotating shafts 205L and 205R with the driven gears 204L and 204R fixed to the lower end and facing in the vertical direction, the moving bodies 206L and 206R inserted into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, and the mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin positions. It mainly has a possible mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 14-2) that is built in the effect unit 32A and can emit light of a light emitting unit 208A composed of the letter "X".

The mounted movable body 32 is inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction at the left and right ends (guided portions) of the mechanical portion 32B, and is locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. By doing so, it is held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the origin position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position by its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism unit 32B. Comes into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R and is restricted from moving downward so that the moving body stops at the effect position.

Further, while spiral groove portions 205A are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have locking portions (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portions 205A on the inner peripheral surface. Since it is formed and the rotation around the rotation shafts 205L and 205R is regulated, the rotation shafts 205L and 205R can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation shafts 205L and 205R in the forward and reverse directions by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can be dropped from the origin position to the effect position by its own weight, and after the fall, the rotating shaft 205L is driven by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B). , 205R is rotated to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies 206L and 206R are raised from the effect position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(1st pseudo movable display and 1st non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-14. 14-14 is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 14-14 is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 shown in FIG. 14-14 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it was not mounted due to various reasons. It is said that the image imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a directing unit M100A formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view and decorated on the front surface, and a mechanical unit M100B. The left side of the mechanical portion M100B extending to the left is supported by the drive mechanism M101 arranged on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 14-14 (B)) is supported. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position indicated by the dotted chain line and the first effect position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIGS. 14-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 faces the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, and the driven gear M104 fixed to the lower end in the vertical direction. The rotating shaft M105, the movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, the moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and the effect unit M100A are built in and viewed from the front. It mainly has a non-mounted movable LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from the circular light emitting unit M108A.

Further, the effect unit M100A has four effect movable units M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting unit M108A with a streak-like decoration on the front surface, and the effect movable units M110A to M110D are close to each other. It is possible to change between an effect state (a state shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-14 (B)) and a second effect state in which the effect movable portions M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting unit M108A.

In the first non-mounted movable body M100, the left end portion (guided portion) of the mechanical portion M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked to the movable body solenoid M107. 1 Held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped from the first origin position by its own weight, and the mechanism unit M100B The left and right ends of the solenoid come into contact with the moving body M106 to restrict downward movement, so that the vehicle stops at the first effect position.

Further, while a spiral groove portion M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, the moving body M106 is formed with a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion M105A on the inner peripheral surface. Since the rotation around the rotation shaft M105 is restricted, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation shaft M105 in the forward and reverse directions so that the rotation shaft M105 can be moved in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can be dropped from the first origin position to the first effect position by its own weight, and after the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped, the rotating shaft M105 is rotated by the movable body motor M102 to move the moving body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first effect position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and is an effect display unit Z100A corresponding to the effect unit M100A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z100B corresponding to the M100B and a light emitting display unit Z108A corresponding to the light emitting unit M108A. Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 14-16 (B)). ), The first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction (FIG.). See 14-17 (A)). Further, the effect unit M100A has the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the effect movable units M110A to M110D, and has a first effect display state corresponding to the first effect state and a second effect display state corresponding to the second effect state. It is possible to change to the production display state.

(2nd pseudo movable display and 2nd non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-15. 14-15 is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 14-15 is a diagram showing a moving mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15 (B) and 14-15 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 shown in FIG. 14-15 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it is not possible due to various circumstances. It is said to be an image imitating the mounted second non-mounted movable body M200.

Regarding the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 14-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 14-15 (C)) showing different operation modes at the beginning of development are shown. The mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mounted movable body itself could not be mounted, so the movement corresponding to the mounting plan 1 described below is used as the second pseudo movable body display Z200. The display and the movement display corresponding to the mounting plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15 (B) and 14-15 (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a directing unit M200A formed in a front view circular shape and decorated on the front surface. A first effect device (mounting plan 1: FIG. 14-15 (mounting plan 1: FIG. 14-15), which is composed of a mechanism unit M200B and is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A in which the lower end of the mechanism unit M100B is arranged below the image display device 5. B)) and the second effect device (mounting plan 2: see FIG. 14-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism unit M100B is supported by the second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5. It is incorporated in each of.

As shown in FIG. 14-15 (B), the first drive mechanism M201A is a rotating body rotated by a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202 and a movable body motor (not shown). It has an M203 and a guide rail M204 that guides the effect unit M200A so as to be movable in the vertical direction. One end of the mechanism portion M200B is rotatably supported around a rotation shaft facing the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 projecting from the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the rotating body M203 slides. An elongated hole M206 that can be inserted is formed.

Therefore, in the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A, the rotating body M203 is rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and the mechanism portion M200B is rotated around the rotation axis. The lower first specific origin position (origin position indicated by a two-point chain line in FIG. 14-15 (B)) and the first specific effect position above the first specific origin position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 14-15 (B)). It is possible to move up and down between the position).

Further, the effect unit M200A includes a rotating unit M207 having a circular front view and a non-mounted movable LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting units M208A to M208E provided in the rotating unit M207. The non-mounted movable LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating unit M207 rotates, and the light emitting units M208A to M208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-15 (C), the second drive mechanism M201B is a driven gear that meshes with the movable body motor M212, the drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and the drive gear M213. It mainly has an M214 and a rotation shaft M215 that faces the left-right direction in which the driven gear M214 is fixed to the left end. Further, while a spiral groove portion M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, the mechanical portion M200B extending upward from the effect portion M200A is locked on the inner peripheral surface so as to be able to be locked to the groove portion M215A. A portion (not shown) is formed, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is regulated.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotation shaft M215 in the forward and reverse directions by the movable body motor M212, so that the second specific origin position on the left side (FIG. 14-15 (C)) ) Is movable in the left-right direction between the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line) and the second specific effect position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 14-15 (C)), and the second specific origin. It is possible to stop at the second intermediate effect position, which is intermediate between the position and the second specific effect position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and is an effect display unit Z200A corresponding to the effect unit M200A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z200B corresponding to the M200B, a rotation display unit Z207 corresponding to the rotation unit M207, and light emission display units Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light emitting units M208A to M208E.

At the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable display Z200 Therefore, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E can be light-emittingly displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors) without considering the cost aspect.

Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (FIGS. 14-16). (See (C)), the second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and the second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position can be moved and displayed in the left-right direction (FIG.). See 14-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. 14-16 shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) the moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) the moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure. 14-17 is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable body display and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the effect unit 32A overlaps at the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the effect position where the effect unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at the center, and the movement distance from the origin position to the effect position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first initial display position in which the lower part of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The first initial display can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction between the first effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially below the center of the display area of the image display device 5. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17 (A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a first specific initial display position in which the upper part of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , The first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5 can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L2A.

As described above, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position, similarly to the first non-mounted movable body M100. Not only can the movable range between them be moved and displayed in the vertical direction, but also a specific movement between the second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and the second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position is possible. The range can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (C), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the lower part of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific initial stage is displayed. It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the display position and the first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the right part of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the left part position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the left-right direction between the initial display position and the second specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. , The moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, has a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific effect corresponding to the first specific effect position. Not only is it possible to move and display the movable range between the display position in the vertical direction, but also the second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and the second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position. The specific movable range between the position and the position can be moved and displayed in the left-right direction.

Further, the moving display distance L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3 of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Shorter than (L2> L1> L3). Further, the moving display distance L2A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3A of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. And the movement display distance is longer than L2A (L3A> L2A> L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that has more impact than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIGS. 14-16, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are composed of the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B. Is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and is produced by the drive mechanism M101, the first drive mechanism M201A, and the second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display units Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to express the moving display more realistically.

That is, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) refers to a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, and a virtual movable body. This is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display unit, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 14-25 (H)).

In addition, a display in which a part of the display mode is different from that of the modeled movable body, a display in a mode that cannot be realized by the modeled movable body (for example, a deformed display or a deformed display) or a moving display (for example, a high-speed moving display, etc.) ) Is possible.

Further, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or a moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or a moving image of a movable body as an actually created structure. There may be. Furthermore, when moving the pseudo-movable body display, the sound effect that is output when the movable body is moved and the sound effect that is the same as or similar to the impact sound that occurs when the movable body is stopped can be output, or the pseudo-movable body display can be displayed as an effect. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., or outputs deep bass from the speakers 8L, 8R to generate a pseudo impact, which is more realistic. It becomes possible to provide the production to the player.

Next, details of various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-10. FIG. 14-10 is a diagram for explaining the contents and configurations of various effects in Super Reach.

(Notice production A)
As shown in FIG. 14-10, the advance notice effect A can be executed when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is displayed after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. It is suggested that the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may become a big hit (expected degree) by displaying the light emission in the color corresponding to the determined effect pattern after the movement is displayed at the display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 14-25 (C) to (F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYA-1 is determined in the advance notice effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when the pattern PYA-2 is determined, light is emitted. The display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, and when the pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when the pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed. Displayed in red. Therefore, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest expectation of big hit is red. The emission color can be changed in various ways, and if the jackpot is confirmed, the emission color may be changed to gold, rainbow, or the like.

(Notice production B)
The notice effect B can be executed when the base is in a high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a big hit depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. It is suggested that there is a possibility (expectation).

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (FIG. 14-34 (A)). ~ (C)). Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (FIG. 14-34 (D)). ~ (F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 14-33). (A)-(C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 14-33). (D)-(F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When the pattern PYB-2 is displayed and the pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. 1 Pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second effect. It is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, the movement display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed has a higher jackpot expectation than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the movement display pattern having the highest jackpot expectation is the first. The pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

Further, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is second. It is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In the development effect A, the on-board movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position, so that the development to a weak super reach is notified (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32 that has been moved from the origin position to the effect position rises from the effect position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

More specifically, when the execution is decided in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the effect start timing, and thus develops into a weak super reach. Is notified (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development notification image Z300 is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the development to weak super reach is notified. (See FIG. 14-25 (G)). That is, when the non-execution is determined by the development effect A type determination process, the effect pattern for notifying the development to the weak super reach is determined by displaying the development notification image Z300 without dropping the mounted movable body 32. Is.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is the same as the movable body. Unlike the pseudo-movable body display that is moved and displayed, it is an image (display) that imitates only the effect unit 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the effect start timing, the display is displayed at the effect display position corresponding to the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 from the beginning without accompanying the movement display.

(Development suggestion production)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position. After that, light is emitted based on the fact that the repeated hitting operation is detected during the operation valid period in which the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B (the operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period) is valid. By changing the display units Z208A to Z208E to the emission display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310 described later, that is, the development effect B may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period in which the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion effect is effective). Is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built in the push button 31B is turned on to promote the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B. The image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period.

Further, in the second pseudo movable body display Z200 which is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the character image Z310 related to the model is first specified in the display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) on the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 14-26 (A) to (J) and 14-27 (A)).

Specifically, when the pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E remain white even when the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When the pattern PS-2 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change in the order of white → blue according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-3 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. Changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B. It changes in the order of green → red. Therefore, the final emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest execution expectation of the development effect B is red.

The emission color and the change pattern of the emission color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the emission color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or may be a emission display color other than white from the beginning. .. Further, the number of lights of the plurality of light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is increased according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, so that the higher the number of lights is, the higher the expectation of execution of the development effect B is higher than when the number of lights is small. You may. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the emission color and the number of emissions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period, or when the repeated hitting operation amount is small, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the continuous hitting operation amount depends on the continuous hitting operation amount. Illustrated a form in which the emission display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to 4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period. Alternatively, even when the amount of repeated hitting operations is small, the emission display color may be changed according to the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the operation valid period ends.

Further, as the character image Z310 displayed after the operation valid period ends, the character image Z310 having a color corresponding to the light emission display color of the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed. There is.

It should be noted that the character images Z310 of different types may be displayed according to the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends. Further, even if the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E does not change even though any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined as described above, the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 are also determined. The character image Z310 (a color different from the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E) may be displayed according to the color corresponding to the character image Z310. Further, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development production B)
In the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the determined effect (game). (Contents that are advantageous to the person) are notified (see FIG. 14-27 (D)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (FIG. 14-27 (FIG. 14-27). D)-(F)).

Further, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the reach title is set in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an manner indicating that it is the time when the display of the image is started, the variable display result becomes a big hit (controlled to the big hit gaming state). ) Is suggested.

Specifically, when execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 changes from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing. By displaying the movement, the development to strong super reach is notified (see FIG. 14-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed in the ready state mode to inform the development of strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27 (C)). That is, the fact that non-execution is determined by the development effect B type determination process means that the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the prepared state without moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200, so that the strong super reach is achieved. It is to determine the production pattern that informs the development of.

(Decisive production)
The deciding effect is to settle the battle confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character, which was executed in the super reach effect, and notify whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after displaying that the ally character gives the final blow to the enemy character, the operation promotion display of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is performed to the player, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. By moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation valid period ends, the enemy character Either the jackpot confirmation notification that defeats the player and wins the battle, or the loss confirmation notification that the mounted movable body 32 is defeated by the enemy character without being moved from the origin position to the production position and is defeated in the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is out of order, and the pattern KB-2, which is a pattern in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character and is defeated in the battle is notified. KV-2 is selected when the variable display result is a big hit, and is a pattern in which a big hit confirmation notification is performed in which a ally character defeats an enemy character and wins the battle.

Further, in the patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

Further, when the execution of the pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the fall timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to and returning to the origin position from the effect position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position to change the decorative pattern. The display resumes. Then, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit (FIG. 14). -29 (E)-(G), see FIGS. 14-30 (A)-(F)).

On the other hand, when the execution of the pattern KB-1 or KV-1 is decided, the mounted movable body 32 does not move from the origin position at the fall timing of the mounted movable body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. The loss confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result is lost (see FIGS. 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, about the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 in the super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status. , 14-11 will be described. FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of a big hit for each execution status of the development effect A and the development effect B.

As shown in FIG. 14-11, the pattern A is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is non-executed and development effect B is execution, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is non-execution, and pattern D is. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set so as to increase in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C <pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. Further, the ratio at which the development effect A and the development effect B are executed is controlled to the jackpot game state more than when the development effect A is executed without the development effect B being executed (big hit expectation). Is high. Further, when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation degree) is higher than when the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 241SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277), and when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a superreach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). Y), the advance notice effect type determination process shown in FIG. 14-19 is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and FIG. 14- The development effect A type determination process shown in 21 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When it is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the advance notice effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is in the low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in the low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the advance effect effect. Is extracted, and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect A is determined using the advance notice effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, when it is not in the low base state, that is, in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), the random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and the notice effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) is extracted. Is used to determine the effect pattern of the advance notice effect B (step 241SGS304).

As shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), in the notice effect A type determination table, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Eight determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and two determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined at the highest ratio when a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and "Pattern" is determined when a non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYA-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PYA-4"> "Pattern PYA-3"> "Pattern PYA-2"> "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 14-20 (B), in the notice effect B type determination table, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Eight determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and two determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, the "pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest ratio when the probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and the "pattern" is determined when the non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYB-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYB-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-2"> "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same is illustrated between the advance notice effect A type determination table for the low base state and the advance notice effect B type determination table for the high base state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different between the advance notice effect A type determination table and the advance notice effect B type determination table.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the advance notice effect type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect (step 241SGS306), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development effect A type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the development effect A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or. It suffices to specify whether it is out of order by the variable display result specification command, and specify whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the development effect A.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development effect type, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect A using the development effect A type determination table shown in FIG. 14-21 (B) (step 241SGS312). ).

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), in the development effect A type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, different judgment values are shown in FIG. 14-21 (B). It is assigned to be the number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". That is, if the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because the weak super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the development effect A is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21 (A), in step 241SGS313, the development effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect A (step 241SGS314), and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and super reach fluctuation. When it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), the development suggestion effect type determination process shown in FIG. 14-22 (A) is executed, and the effect pattern (effect type) of the development suggestion effect is determined in the variable display (step). 241SGS280), the development effect B type determination process shown in FIG. 14-23 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and FIG. 14-24 (step 241SGS281). The effect pattern (effect type) of the determined effect is determined in the variable display by executing the determined effect B type determined process shown in A) (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22 (A), in the development suggestion effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development suggestion effect using the development suggestion effect type determination table shown in FIG. 14-22 (B) (step 241SGS322). ).

As shown in FIG. 14-22 (B), in the development suggestion effect type determination table, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, the "pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest ratio when the probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and the "pattern" is determined when the non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is out of order, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. That is, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PS-4"> "Pattern PS-3"> "Pattern PS-2"> "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22 (A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion effect type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development suggestion effect (step 241SGS324), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), in the development effect B type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice production is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Either of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In addition, the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect B using the development effect B type determination table shown in FIG. 14-23 (B) (step 241SGS332). ..

As shown in FIG. 14-23 (B), in the development effect B type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, different judgment values are shown in FIG. 14-23 (B). It is assigned to be the number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. .. Further, when the variable display result is out of the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. That is, in the case where the super reach α is out of alignment, the development effect B is not executed because it does not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the development effect B is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23 (A), in step 241SGS333, the development effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect B (step 241SGS334), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 14-24 (A), in the determination effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination effect type shown in FIG. 14-24 (B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The production pattern of the determination effect is determined using the table (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined determined effect type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the determined effect (step 241SGS343), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 14-24 (B), in the determination effect type determination table, an operation promotion display is performed in which the operation of the push button 31B is enabled and the player is encouraged to perform a single push operation of the push button 31B. "KB-1", "Pattern KB-2", "Pattern KV-1", "Pattern KV-" that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and displays an operation promotion display to the player to promote the single pulling operation of the stick controller 31A. For each of 2 ”, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probability jackpot, and super reach is lost. Different determination values are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-24 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. When the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KV-1”. Is assigned.

When the determination value is assigned in this way and a probability variation jackpot occurs in the variable display, the "pattern KV-1" whose operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest ratio, and the non-probability variation jackpot is determined. In the case of, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest ratio, and in the case of being out of super reach, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. Is determined at the highest rate. That is, the probability variation jackpot expectation is higher when the stick controller 31A is the operation target than when the push button 31B is the operation target. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature unit 241SG, the random number for determining the advance notice effect, the random number for determining the development effect A, the random number for determining the development suggestion effect, the random number for determining the development effect B, and the random number for determining the determined effect are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, respectively. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, although the number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100 of the number of judgment values of these various effect determination random numbers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various effect determination random numbers and the like are appropriate. You just have to decide. Further, a random number counter for determining the effect for generating these various random numbers for determining the effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for determining the effect is updated every time the timer is interrupted by the random number update process. Further, a common random number may be used as these various random numbers for determining the effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the effect patterns of various effects are determined in the various effect type determination processes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a character appears in addition to the above effects. It may be decided to execute a notice effect such as a character notice effect, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes stepwise, and a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. In the case of determining, since the timing for starting the advance notice effect differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect, a different period may be set according to the mode of the advance notice effect in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, in step 241SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 241SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the variable display image data including the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of production operation of Super Reach β)
Next, an example of the effect of Super Reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-25 to 14-31. 14-25 are diagrams in which (A) to (H) show an example of an effect of super reach β mainly in normal reach. 14-26 are diagrams in which (A) to (J) show an example of a directing operation mainly in a weak super reach. 14-27 are diagrams in which FIGS. 14-27 show an example of the effect operation in the same weak super reach. 14-28 are diagrams in which (A) to (D) show an example of a directing operation mainly in a strong super reach. 14-29 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a strong super reach effect in FIGS. 14-29. 14-30 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation after the big hit confirmation notification. 14-31 are diagrams (A) to (D) showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Hereinafter, various production operation examples in the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be described.

As shown in FIG. 14-25 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a variable manner based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. To start. Further, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "2"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), and the small corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying a symbol (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and a small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Regarding the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the small symbol, and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are duplicated, and the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the small number are duplicated. While it is possible to prevent the visibility of the symbol and the error display from being lowered, the decorative symbol is displayed on the back side (lower layer) of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. Therefore, it is prevented that the decorative symbols overlap and the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is lowered.

After starting the variable display, when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode as shown in FIG. 14-25 (B), the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 14-25 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the advance notice effect A in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. After displaying in, it is moved to the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-25 (D)), and as shown in FIG. 14-25 (E), it is determined by the advance notice effect type determination process in step 241SGS278A. By causing the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E to emit light with the display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to 4), the advance notice effect A suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the emission display units Z208A to Z208A based on the pattern PYA-4. When the emission display color of the Z208E is emitted in red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size is increased according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second is displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the advance notice effect A ends. After that, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner slightly larger than the small symbol.

Then, when the non-execution of the development effect A is determined in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (G), the mounted movable body is at the start timing of the development effect A. While holding the development notification image Z300 at the origin position without dropping the 32, the development notification image Z300 is displayed and the effect image Z61A is displayed around the development notification image Z61A to notify that the development to a weak super reach effect is developed. When the execution of the development effect A is determined, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (H), the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on at the start timing of the development effect A, and the mounted movable body is turned on. The 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around the effect image Z61B to notify that the effect image Z61B is developed into a weak super reach effect.

In the feature unit 241SG, when the on-board movable body 32 is dropped as the development effect A, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the on-board movable body 32 is not executed. Even if it is determined that the non-execution of (falling) is not performed, it is possible to notify that the development notification image Z300 will develop into a weak super reach effect by displaying the development notification image Z300.

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), the effect control CPU 120 starts a weak super reach effect by displaying a character image Z310 or the like after the execution period of the development effect A ends, and also starts a second pseudo. After displaying the movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, the movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestion effect is started (see FIG. 14-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed so as to partially overlap the front side of the character image Z310.

Further, as a development suggestion effect, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is turned on. , Promotes the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26 (C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. Then, when any of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS280, the push button 31B during the operation valid period is as shown in FIGS. 14-26 (D). The effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the repeated hitting operation (number of times the operation is detected), and the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E are changed every time a predetermined time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-26 (E), the blackout display is used to darken the background image while maintaining the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E even after the operation valid period ends. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the light emission display color of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed at a position above the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasizing (see FIG. 14-26 (F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26 (G)), and then medium. After displaying the character image Z310 of the size (see FIG. 14-26 (H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26 (I)), and then the large size character image Z310 is displayed. The character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26 (J)).

In FIGS. 14-26 (E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, the light emission display of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E is continued, but the effect image Z62 is preferably not displayed.

In this way, the character images Z310 having the same color as the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a manner of gradually increasing from the back side to the front side of the screen, and the small size, medium size, and large size character images Z310 are displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26 (J) in FIGS. 14-27, the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By overlapping the Z200 on the front side of at least a part of the Z200 so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be visually recognized through the overlapped area, the expectation that the development effect B is executed is more preferable. Can be fanned.

Further, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed on the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. It can be preferably suggested that the development effect B is executed by displaying the character image Z310 while distracting the player's consciousness.

Further, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a mode of gradually increasing the size, at least the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the front side. Further, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. 1 Erase (hide) without moving to the specific initial display position. Specifically, as an erasure display for emphasizing that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 has been erased, it is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by hiding it in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature unit 241SG, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 as the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode of erasing (non-displaying) without moving from the display position to the first specific initial display position has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is as shown in FIGS. 14-26 (F). When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may be erased (hidden) without moving from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one that is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed. While fading out the Z200, the Z200 may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position to be displayed and erased (hidden).

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the development effect B. Here, when the non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is first specified as shown in FIG. 14-27 (C). The reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility) while erasing without moving from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, we will inform you that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (D), when the execution of the development effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, we will inform you that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotation display unit Z207 including the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is displayed. It is displayed in a mode of rotating it clockwise in front view. Further, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E in FIGS. 14-27 (D) do not suggest a jackpot expectation, unlike the development suggestion effect, and are displayed on the image display device 5 as an image of a weak reach effect. The emission display color is set according to the color of the effect image Z65 or the like displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (E), after displaying the reach title image Z51 described later in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility), FIG. 14- As shown in 27 (F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the super reach display mode, the reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and the reach indicating the jackpot expectation level are shown. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has been developed. Next, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an image Z52 in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 14-28 (B)). Then, when the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the super reach display mode is set, that is, the operation target is a push button. In the case of 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (C), an operation promotion image Z53 for promoting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is displayed to the player. On the other hand, when the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). The operation promotion image Z54 for promoting the pulling operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed on the player.

The timing or push when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is a big hit at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E), the mounted movable body 32 Is executed from the origin position to the effect position on the front side of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. Further, according to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is set to a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color). Make it emit light.

The effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which the glass is cracked and scattered, and an embodiment having the same mode as the effect image Z71 described later is illustrated. The effect image is not limited to the above, and may be an effect image having a mode different from that of the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying only a part of the glass in a manner in which only a part of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments and the remaining part is left, the mounted movable body 32 is displayed overlapping with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in a situation where it is difficult to see, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to grasp what has happened over a period of time.

Further, also in the effect image Z55, similarly to the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattered manner is the mounted movable body 32 arranged on the front side of the image display device 5. By reflecting a part of the display, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the effect position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 showing that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , As shown in FIG. 14-29 (G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation. Even if the combination of big hit symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and the glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo-movable. The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D are first produced. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. Further, it is the same as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 14-29 (E) according to the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The speakers 8L and 8R are output with a predetermined sound effect, and the light emitting display unit Z108A is made to emit a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, the details of the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 described with reference to FIGS. 14-30 (A) and 14-30 (B) are shown in FIG. 14-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 14-31 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing a mode in which the glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5. At the same time, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. The effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a part of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be visually recognized below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (B), when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, FIG. 14 The amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased as compared with the state shown in −31 (A), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed on the front side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position, the glass shards are more than those shown in FIGS. 14-31 (B). The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing the above are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100.

In this way, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 according to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed as the first initial display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. While displaying in the display area including the position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is moved from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. By displaying the image Z71A in a manner of being scattered around, not only can the image Z71A give a three-dimensional effect, but also the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be made to look as if it were a real structure.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31 (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is transparent to any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body is displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed visually or displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31 (D). By reflecting and displaying a part of the Z100, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then displays the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D as the first effect. While changing from the state to the second effect display state, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves and displays the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 displays the light emitting display unit Z108A in the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, an effect period in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position as a blinking display pattern that is light-emitting for 33 ms) and then hidden for the second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33 ms). While repeating the process a plurality of times over ta1 to ta4, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for the first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then the second corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the second period is lit. The blinking pattern of turning off the light for 40 ms) is repeated a plurality of times over the production period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A at substantially the same cycle, the effect can be more preferably excited. It is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time for emitting and displaying the light emitting display unit Z108A (for example, 33 ms) and the time for lighting the mounted movable body LED 208 (for example, 30 ms) in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in some cases, for example, by making the extinguishing period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the difference between the light emitting display of the light emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 becomes large as time passes. Can be prevented.

Further, during the effect periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration effect may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the production can be made more exciting. The drive of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30 (C), the effect control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second effect display state to the first effect display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative symbol. After temporarily stopping and displaying in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed upward, and FIG. 14-30 ( As shown in E), it is erased after moving to the first effect display position and displaying. Then, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols.

In this way, the jackpot gaming state is controlled by executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to perform the jackpot confirmation notification, and then executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100. Can be more preferably felt by the player.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (from the stick controller 31A) during the operation valid period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is off at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or when the operation valid period ends without detecting the single push operation of the push button 31B or the single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, FIG. 14-29. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed and the effect image Z57 is displayed without executing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area. As shown in FIG. 14-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 showing that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (J), the combination of the missed symbols is displayed. Stop display is displayed and notification of disconnection confirmation is performed. In addition, the combination of the missed symbols is synchronized with the stop display, and the small symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the missed symbols.

For example, the operation timing of the push button 31B differs between the case where the push button 31B is operated at the start of the operation valid period and the case where the push button 31B is not operated during the operation valid period. The difference in scale caused by 1. 2. Period of shaking of the decorative design until the design is confirmed. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. It may be absorbed by extending or shortening any period of the effect period of the movable body effect.

(Example of production operation of Super Reach γ)
Next, an example of the effect of the super reach γ will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-33 to 14-34. 14-33 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. 14-34 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ.

In the following, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B executed in the normal reach effect in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ will be described, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach effect is the same as that of the super reach β. Therefore, the description is omitted. The super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33 (A), when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 14-33 (B)) to perform a big hit. The notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5L by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-33 (D), when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-33 (E)) to perform a big hit. The notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5C by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C at the second specific effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (A), when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position and then moved to the first effect display position (see FIG. 14-34 (B)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. do.

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (D), when the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed from the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the second initial display position and then moved to the second effect display position (see FIG. 14-34 (E)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second effect display position to the second initial display position. do.

(Pseudo movable body display and movable body)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35 to 14-40. 14-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 14-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 14-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 14-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is different from the mounted movable body 32 in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 14-14 (B). Although it is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both substantially the same position in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position. Since the effect positions of the mounted movable body 32 and the mounted movable body 32 are both lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin. The direction of movement from the position to the effect position is the common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

As described with reference to FIGS. 14-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the effect position from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32. The moving distance to is longer than L1 (L2> L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A') to 14-35 (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) due to its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower effect position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) to (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first effect display from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position. It takes about 100 ms to move and display the position. That is, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a longer movement display distance and is more than the movement from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. Is also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 can be mounted and moved as a structure that can be moved in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. When it is possible to move and display from almost the same position as the body 32 in the same direction, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is the movement display of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the production position, it is possible to perform a production with an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 actually mounted, which surprises the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A') and 14-36 (B'), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has moved from the first origin position to the first effect position below the first origin position. Occasionally, the mechanism unit M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the moving body M106 and stops due to the downward movement being restricted, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a recoil operation (rebound) of a predetermined movement amount. It is said that the display imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which the above is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A) and 14-36 (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. When the stop display is performed at the effect display position, the recoil motion display (rebound display) of a specific movement amount is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the effect unit M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first effect position, the mechanism unit M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since it comes into contact with the upper part of the head and the downward movement is restricted, the mechanism unit M100B undergoes a recoil operation due to vibration before the effect unit M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the effect unit M100A to generate a recoil operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after performing the recoil operation display of the mechanism unit M100B. , As shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2), the recoil operation display of the effect unit M100A is performed. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display that imitates the mounted movable body 32). It can be moved and displayed in a different mode).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (C') and 14-36 (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the effect unit 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and moves to the effect position. At that time, the mechanism unit 32B abuts on the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206 to restrict the downward movement, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount.

Next, the operation modes of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the determination effect will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 14-28 to 14-30, the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the determined effect. After executing and performing the jackpot confirmation notification, it is possible to execute the pseudo movable body display in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines and starts the effect at the timing ta0, and then the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the operation valid period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position during the period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) of the timing ta1 to ta2, and then the recoil operation is performed during the period of the timing ta2 to ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

After that, at the timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the effect position to the origin position, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is the period of the timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position. Longer than TL1 (eg, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position.

In this way, in the production using the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the production position in response to the operation detection of the player, the game is performed by dropping the mounted movable body 32 faster by its own weight. While it is possible to give an impact to a person, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by the impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position at the timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot confirmation notification is performed, and the period TL2 (for example, the period ta6 to ta7) of the timing ta6 to ta7. After moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (about 100 ms), the recoil motion display is performed during the period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

After that, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position at the timing ta9, and then the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta9 to ta10 when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is first. It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) of the timing ta6 to ta7 for moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display. It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying.

As described above, in the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more than the movement display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner by making it the same as the mounted movable body 32, such as by increasing the speed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (C), the amount of movement of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil operation display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved and displayed from the origin position to the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, 4 times). By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (A) and 14-38 (B), the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the first non-mounted movable body The movement display distance L2 from the first origin position to the first effect display position of the M100 is the same, and the period TL2 for moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is The period for moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position is shorter than the period TL10 (TL2 <TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from one origin position to the first effect position. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position. Is also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (C), the amount of movement of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. In L12, the movement amount L11 of the first recoil operation display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 is the first from the first origin position. It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil operation display performed when the movement is displayed at the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements (for example, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 simulates the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. It can be realized, and the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the effect position is displayed in an exaggerated manner. It is possible to provide a production that leaves a lasting impression on the person.

In the feature unit 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is The first recoil motion and the recoil motion display were compared, but any of the recoil motions and the recoil motion display after the second time may be compared, or the total or average movement amount of the multiple recoil motions and the recoil motion. It may be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

Further, the recoil motion exemplifies a form in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when the movable body is stopped at the second position, but includes the deformation or vibration of a predetermined portion of the movable body due to the recoil. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, or the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first effect position to the first origin position. In this case, since a drive source such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R or M101 is used, the effect control CPU 120 timings the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when the movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. That is, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until the first period elapses after the start of movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in the second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are moved and displayed is from the timing tb1 at which the movement is started to the timing tb4 at which the movement is stopped, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (B). Since it is constant and the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are unnecessary, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the first non-mounted movable body M100. And the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be performed more smoothly.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-40.

As shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A) to 14-40 (C), when creating a moving image in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo is created. The first frame, which is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and the second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , Is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A') to 14-40 (B'), when creating a moving image in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. At the very least, for displaying the first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As described with reference to FIGS. 14-16, it is the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and is the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The movement display distance L3 from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 is longer than the movement display distance L3, but the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect. While the time required to move and display to the display position is about 100 ms, the time required to move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is about about 100 ms. Since it differs at 800 ms, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than moving display to a specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A), FIG. 14- It is conceivable to display the second frame in the order shown in 40 (C), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the interpolation frame 1 shown in FIG. 14-40 (B) is inserted as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the moving image is increased to increase the frame rate, and the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed for each display frame, the first initial display position, By performing the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position in this order, a natural and smooth movement display can be performed.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed at high speed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth movement display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without deteriorating the visibility.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (A'), It is conceivable to display the second frame in the order shown in FIG. 14-40 (B'), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, in order to display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position between the first frame and the second frame. As an input image, a plurality of interpolated frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the number of frames of the moving image to increase the frame rate to realize a natural and smooth moving display, and the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By performing the movement display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed at a speed slower than that of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without deteriorating the visibility.

Further, for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When PBY-4 to be moved and displayed is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, the pattern PBY- 1. The ratio controlled to the big hit state (big hit expectation) is different from that when PBY-2 is executed, so that the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is different between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second. The pseudo movable body display Z200 can be recognized by the player due to the difference in the speed of the movement display.

Further, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position when is executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (big hit expectation) is higher than when is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be noticed.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position on the image display device 5. An example of a mode in which a recoil motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount is performed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 14-34 (D) to (E), an image display is performed. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stopped and displayed at the second effect display position on the device 5, a recoil operation display of a predetermined movement amount ( Bounce display) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 (A) to (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When the second intermediate effect display position is stopped and displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 14-33 (D) to (E), the image display device 5 displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the second specific initial display position. When the movement is displayed at the second specific effect display position and the stop display is performed at the second specific effect display position, a recoil operation display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

Further, in the notice effect B, the recoil operation display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position is a notice. In the effect A, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil operation display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, since the amount of movement of the advance notice effect B is larger than that of the advance notice effect A, the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position after the pattern PBY-3 of the advance notice effect B or the big hit notification of the determined effect is performed. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in the pattern PBY-4 of the advance notice effect B. .. By doing so, the recoil motion display becomes larger when the downward movement display is performed than when the upward movement display is performed, so that the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin positions. The direction of movement from to the effect position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. big.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised by the fact that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32.
Further, since it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to realize with the mounted movable body 32 and to move and display at a plurality of speeds, it is possible to diversify the effect.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the moving speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison of the speed between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison of speed with movement. That is, in the case of comparing the speeds of the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display and the movement of the movable body, the pseudo-movable body display and the type of the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount is performed when moving from the first origin position to the first effect position. The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the direction, and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, a predetermined amount of movement is displayed. The reaction motion display (rebound display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the recoil motion display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the recoil motion amount of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, it may be a comparison of the recoil motion display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the recoil motion of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body. It may be a comparison between the recoil motion display of the display Z200 and the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32. That is, in the case of comparing the amount of movement between the reactionary motion display of the pseudo-movable body display and the recoil motion of the movable body, the pseudo-movable body display and the type of the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the development effect A, which is a movable body effect, and the development effect B, which is a pseudo-movable body display effect, are executed.
When the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the game including the case where the development effect A and the development effect B are controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a rate of 100% when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In addition, it suggests the possibility that the advance notice effect A that announces the possibility (expectation degree) that the variable display result will be a big hit, the development effect B that notifies that the variable display result will develop into a strong super reach effect, and the development effect B will be executed. It is possible to execute the development suggestion effect, and in the advance notice effect A, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display is displayed. After moving from the position to the first specific initial display position and then hiding it, in the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific effect display position, and then from the first specific effect display position. The second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden before the development effect B is executed by hiding the movement display to the first specific initial display position. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the advance notice effect A, since the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves and displays in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body, from the first specific effect display position. Since the display is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of the execution of the development effect B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the deciding effect is executed. When the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then the first specific effect display is displayed. A display area including the first specific effect display position, in which the reach title image Z51 suggesting the execution of the development effect B is hidden without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then the display is performed. It is hidden after being moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position.
According to this feature, before the determination effect is executed, the second display of the suggestive image is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. Since it is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of execution of the decision effect, while in the decision effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the same as the movable body. Since the movement is displayed in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In the feature unit 241SG, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo-movable body display may be moved between the specific effect and the special effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position, and in the display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, a specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which the glass is cracked and the image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display is emphasized by a specific image to give a suitable impression to the player. Can be attached.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position, and the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the advance notice effect B, which is faster than the movement display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second. The ratio controlled to the jackpot state (big hit expectation) differs between when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is different. The player can be made to recognize the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the movement display.
In the notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the pattern PBY-3 are moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. A big hit when the pattern PBY-4 to be executed is executed and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. The difference in the ratio controlled to the state (expected jackpot) is that the percentage controlled to the jackpot state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed in the advance notice B is 100%, and the pattern PBY- When 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0%, or when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the advance notice effect B, the jackpot state is controlled. This includes the case where the ratio is 100% and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

Further, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 a display image having not only the effect display units Z100A and Z200A but also the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, the movable body operates by the drive mechanism. While it is possible to express the body more realistically and realize a movable body display effect similar to the movable body effect, with regard to the movement display, not only the movement display is performed in the same manner as the movement of the movable body, but also the movable body is displayed. Then, by making it possible to move and display a mode that is difficult to realize due to reasons such as a complicated mechanism and an increase in cost, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the production.

In addition, the feature unit 241SG erases (hides) the movement display in a mode that is difficult to realize with a movable body, without displaying the high-speed movement, the deformed display, and the return display from the effect display position to the initial display position. Although the above is illustrated, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo-movable body display and unrealistically displaying the moving display.

In particular, since the pseudo movable body display moved to the effect display position can be hidden or displayed at a desired timing, for example, the movable body as a structure moved to the effect display position is returned to the origin position. At that time, it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to hiding of other production images, and it is possible to start the next production immediately, which has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in production design. Play.

Further, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is possible to realize the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the above, and exaggerate the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position. By displaying in the above-mentioned manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, since the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is mounted. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, the pseudo movable body display includes the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B are more than the effect display units Z100A and Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various modes.

Further, the movement period between the origin position and the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display is included. By not including the first period and the second period, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A in substantially the same cycle. , The player can be made to pay attention to the first pseudo movable body display Z100 which is moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not emit light from the light emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, so that the incomplete first pseudo movable body display Z100 during the moving display is seen. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A in substantially the same cycle. , The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position, and is second in the advance notice effect A. The pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is secondly specified from the second specific initial display position in the advance notice effect B. By moving to the effect display position and displaying differently from the right direction, one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, so the player can create an unexpected effect that is difficult to achieve with a movable body. Can be provided to.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from that of the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-41. 14-41 is a diagram showing modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG in FIGS. 14-41.

In the feature unit 241SG, as described with reference to FIG. 14-25, in the advance notice effect A, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, it is displayed. An example is illustrated in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A after moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and then erasing.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and a part of the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, that is, the mounted movable body is moved to the effect position. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and the second pseudo. When the movement display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is overlapped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not a structure but a display body, and the interest of the production is lowered.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see FIG. 14-41 (B)), by erasing without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-41 (C)), FIG. 14 As shown in −41 (D), it may be avoided that the mounted movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A overlaps with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-42. 14-42 are views (A) to (H) showing a modification 2 of the feature portion 241SG.

In the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position and the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and below the first position. The direction of movement between the second position and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as the second modification is moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position above the first display position. , Is a common direction (for example, in the vertical direction), the movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display Z402 is the second from the first position of the mounted movable body 401. It should be faster than moving to a position.

Further, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward direction). And may be in different directions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention Is not limited to this, and as in the second modification, by executing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body 401 are simulated. It may be possible to perform an effect using the movable body display Z402.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-42, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure in which the characters "go" are displayed, and is the first structure above the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move between one position and a second position below the first position, and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as the second modification are the first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. And the second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as the second modification can display the characters of "body" and is an image display device. It is possible to move and display between the first display position at the bottom of the display area 5 and the second display position above the first display position. The detailed drive mechanism of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R will not be illustrated or described.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned advance notice effects A, B, development effects A, B, etc., first, FIG. As shown in 14-42 (A), the pseudo-movable body display is shown in FIG. 14-42 (B) with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R standing by at the first position. After displaying Z402 at the first display position, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (C), the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z 402 so that the mounted movable body 401 does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays the pseudo movable body display Z402 to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is simulated. The closest to the movable body display Z402, the character "coalescence" is recognizable in a pseudo-coalescence state. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (F), while maintaining the pseudo-union state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to the second predetermined position, it is notified that the effect is developed due to the success of the pseudo-coalescence.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position and the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is set as the first display position. Is moved and displayed by dividing the image into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased by frame-out or fade-out on the left and right sides of the screen.

On the other hand, when it is decided to notify that the pseudo-coalescence is not successful and the effect does not develop, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved downward and pseudo-movable. In the middle of displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is stopped while decelerating, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in such a manner that the upper part is destroyed. Notify that the pseudo coalescence is not successful and the production does not develop. As described above, in the pseudo-movable body display Z402, it is possible to easily realize an effect in a mode that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Modification example 3)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-43. 14-43 are views (A) to (C) showing a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one capable of reciprocating movement display in one direction such as a vertical direction or a horizontal direction. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 14-43 ( A) As shown in (B), after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement is displayed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), in the first effect display position, what is a linear movement display in one direction, such as displaying only the effect display unit Z200A vertically around a rotation axis that faces the left-right direction? It is preferable to be able to execute various modes of movement display, such as different rotational movement displays and movement displays in a mode of moving toward another direction (for example, a depth direction) different from one direction. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the feature portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Is also included in this invention.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
The feature portion 241SG exemplifies a form in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of devices other than the mounted movable body 32 are used. The movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the frame is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on a game machine frame 3 or an opening / closing door capable of opening and closing the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display that imitates a side movable body may be movable and displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device provided in connection with the game.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that are planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but are not mounted is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are scheduled to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they are not mounted. May be good.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are hidden in a manner of gradually fading out when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are erased. The effect image that emphasizes the erased image may be displayed without limitation, or may be erased by a method other than these.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect display position is the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position. It is shorter than that, and when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, a common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed, and is common. Although the form of outputting the effect sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position is set to the first of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the moving display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and has a different mode depending on whether the mounted movable body 32 moves or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. It may be displayed and a different sound effect may be output. By doing so, it is possible to make the movement of the mounted movable body 32 stand out by utilizing the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times as the development effect A and the effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , The notice effect B and the determined effect can be executed up to 2 times, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed up to 4 times of the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect B, the development suggestion effect, and the development effect B. Although a certain form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of execution of the movement display of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above number of times.

Further, when the movable body can be moved the first time in one variable display period, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved a second time more than the first time in one variable display period. preferable. By doing so, instead of increasing the execution opportunity of the movable body effect too much and lowering the jackpot expectation, by increasing the execution opportunity of the pseudo movable body display, the effect is reduced. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

In addition to the above-mentioned plurality of effects, for example, the pseudo movable body display may be moved and displayed at the time of symbol promotion in the re-lottery after the big hit confirmation notification, or during the big hit middle effect. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Further, the advance notice effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state, the development effect B is applied as a notification effect for notifying the content advantageous to the player, and the notification effect is executed. A development suggestion effect is applied as a suggestion predetermined effect, a determined effect is applied as a special effect notifying that the special effect is controlled to an advantageous state, and it is suggested that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed. Although the embodiment in which the notice effect B is applied is illustrated as the specific effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects other than the above can be applied. Further, although these various effects can be executed in the variable display period of one super reach, the effects may be executed over a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, the contents that are advantageous for the player are, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, pseudo-ream, big hit, small hit, reach, hold ream, chance-up effect, pre-reading notice effect, time reduction loss, ceiling time reduction control described later, etc. , Variable display results, controls and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning and the like may be included.

Further, when the feature unit 241SG starts displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the game board 2 and the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 may be displayed. By reducing or turning off the brightness, the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. When erasing, the game for the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is performed by increasing or lighting the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. It can distract the person's consciousness.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 can be adjusted by the player's operation, while the first pseudo movable body display Z100. It is preferable that the amount of light of the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E of the light emitting display unit Z108A and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 cannot be adjusted by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being spoiled or inconspicuous.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden in the development suggestion effect, the display area including the first specific effect display position is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image is an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If there is, an image other than the character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the development effect B, as a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the determined effect, a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the mode at the start of display is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. An image other than the reach title image (for example, a character image appearing in a strong super reach effect or a determined effect) may be used as long as the suggested image suggests the execution of the determined effect. ..

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed in different periods, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a plurality of pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, the movable displayable range of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. And the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, one of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the display layer on the front side of the other, so that they can be displayed on each other. Since it is possible to make people aware of the front-back positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic production.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, it is considered that the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed. Then, the mounted movable body, the center decorative frame, or the like may be arranged so as to cover the portion where the display of the mechanism display unit of the pseudo movable body display is started in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body may be movable. It may be difficult to visually recognize the portion where the display of the mechanical display unit of the pseudo movable body display is started by moving the body.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which "time reduction loss" is included as a display result of the variable display is illustrated, but the CPU 103 describes a predetermined condition (for example, a flag stored in the RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6). Variable display has been performed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when the counter or buffer is cleared, the jackpot game state is controlled, or the display result is set to be out of time. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time reduction control that controls the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state (for example, 900 times) by the ceiling time reduction control is the same as the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). May be different.

When the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without satisfying the above-mentioned predetermined conditions, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second. Pseudo-movable body display The moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as Z200 may be executable. In this way, it may be possible to execute the movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification such as the big hit notification, the notification of the loss of time reduction, the notification of the ceiling time reduction control, and the type and movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification. The mode and the like may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed as a notification of a big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a small hit or a time saving. In the case of a loss or when the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is used to notify the small hit or the time reduction and the ceiling time reduction control. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a short hit, or if the display result of the variable display is a big hit, a common type of pseudo-movable body display is used for notification, but the movement display is used. The mode may be different. In addition, depending on the case where the display result of the variable display is a small hit or the time reduction is off, and the case where the display result of the variable display is a big hit, the pseudo-movable body display is used to notify, but the type of the pseudo-movable body display is It may be different.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine capable of being controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game is applied as a pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , A so-called type 1 or 2 type of gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in a short time state after the jackpot game is completed, and the game playability can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for the game. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A 1st special symbol display device, 4B 2nd special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative symbol display area, 6A winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 count switch, 25A 1st hold indicator, 25B 2nd hold indicator, 25C normal figure hold indicator, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 pass gate, 81,82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 Random circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
The second guidance display is not affected by the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state.
Moreover,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production,
With
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position,
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images